blob: ec5db1e5744d2114444a3d5aa068760db4ad0f49 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000026#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000027#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000039#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000041#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000043#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000044#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
45#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000049#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000050#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000051#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000052using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000053using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000054
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000055#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
56
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000057// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
58// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
59// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
60// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000061static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
62 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
63 cl::desc(
64 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
65
66static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
67 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
68 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000069
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000070static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000071 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
72 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000073
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000074static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
75 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
76 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000077
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000078static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
79 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
80 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
81 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
82 "predicated store"));
83
84static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
85 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
86 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
87 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
88
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +000089static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
90 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
91 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
92 "executed"));
93
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +000094static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
95 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
96 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
97 "speculatively executed instructions"));
98
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000099STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000100STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
101 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
102STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
103 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
104STATISTIC(
105 NumLookupTablesHoles,
106 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000107STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000108STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
109 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000110STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000111
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000112namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000113// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
114// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
115// cases composing the case group.
116typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000117 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000118// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
119// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
120// switch for that PHI.
121typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000122
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000123/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
124struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
125 ConstantInt *Value;
126 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000127
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000128 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000129 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
130
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
132 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
133 return Value < RHS.Value;
134 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000135
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000136 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
137};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000138
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000139class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000140 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000141 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000142 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000143 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000144 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000145 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000146 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
147 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000148 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000149 BasicBlock *Pred,
150 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000151 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
152 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000153
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000154 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000155 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000156 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
157 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000158 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000159 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000160 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000161 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000162 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
163 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000164
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000165public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000166 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000167 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
168 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
169 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
170 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
172};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000173}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000174
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000175/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000176/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000177static bool
178SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000179 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000180 if (SI1 == SI2)
181 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000182
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000183 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
184 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
185 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
186 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
187 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000188
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000189 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
190 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000191 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
192 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
193 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000194 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
195 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000196 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
197 if (FailBlocks)
198 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
199 Fail = true;
200 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000201 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000202
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000203 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000204}
205
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000206/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
207/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
208/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000209static bool
210isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
211 Instruction *Cond,
212 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
213 if (SI1 == SI2)
214 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000215 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
216
217 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000218 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000219 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
220 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
221 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
222 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000223 if (!Ci2)
224 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000225 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
226 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
227 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
228 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
229 return false;
230
231 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
232 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000233 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000234 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
235 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
236 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000237 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
238 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000239 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000240 return false;
241 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
242 }
243 return true;
244}
245
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000246/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
247/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
248/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
249/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000250static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
251 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000252 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
253 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000254
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000255 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000256 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000257 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000258}
259
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000260/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
261/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
262/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000263/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000264static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000265 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000266 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000267 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000268 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000269}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000270
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000271/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
272/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000273/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
274/// which works well enough for us.
275///
276/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000277/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
278/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
279/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
280/// set and true is returned.
281///
282/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
283/// Select whose cost is 2.
284///
285/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
286/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
287/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000288static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000289 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000290 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000291 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
292 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000293 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
294 // so limit the recursion depth.
295 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
296 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
297 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
298 return false;
299
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000300 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000301 if (!I) {
302 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
303 // can be executed unconditionally.
304 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
305 if (C->canTrap())
306 return false;
307 return true;
308 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000309 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000310
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000311 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000312 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000313 if (PBB == BB)
314 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000315
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000316 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
317 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000318 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
319 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000320 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000321 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000322
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000323 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
324 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000325 if (!AggressiveInsts)
326 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000327
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000328 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000329 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
330 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000331
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000332 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
333 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
334 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000335 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000336 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000337
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000338 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000339
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000340 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
341 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
342 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
343 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
344 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
345 // enabled further IR optimizations.
346 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
347 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000348 return false;
349
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000350 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
351 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000352
353 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
354 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000355 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000356 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
357 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000358 return false;
359 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
360 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000361 return true;
362}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000363
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000364/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000365/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000366static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000367 // Normal constant int.
368 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000369 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000370 return CI;
371
372 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
373 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000374 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000375
376 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
377 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
378 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
379
380 // IntToPtr const int.
381 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
382 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
383 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
384 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
385 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
386 return CI;
387 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000388 return cast<ConstantInt>(
389 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000390 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000391 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000392}
393
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000394namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000395
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000396/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
397/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
398/// structure.
399/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
400/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
401/// representing the different cases for the switch.
402/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
403/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
404/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
405/// fail.
406struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000407 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000408 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
409 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
410 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
411 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000412
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000413 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000414 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
415 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
416 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000417 }
418
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000419 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000420 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000421 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000422 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000423
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000425 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
426 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
427 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000428 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
429 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000430 CompValue = NewVal;
431 return (CompValue != nullptr);
432 }
433
434 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
435 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
436 /// match depending on isEQ).
437 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
438 /// against is placed in CompValue.
439 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
440 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000441 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000442 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
443 ICmpInst *ICI;
444 ConstantInt *C;
445 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000446 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000447 return false;
448 }
449
450 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000451 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000452
453 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000454 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000455 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000456 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000457
458 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
459 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
460
461 /*
462 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
463 x : BITVECTOR(64);
464 y : BITVECTOR(64);
465 z : BITVECTOR(64);
466 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
467 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
468 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
469 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000470 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
471 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
472 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000473 */
474
475 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
476 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
477 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
478 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
479 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
480 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
481 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
482
483 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
484 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
485 //
486 // mask = (1 << z)
487 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
488 //
489 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
490 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
491
492 // Pattern match a special case:
493 /*
494 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
495 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
496 );
497 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000498 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000499 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
500 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000501 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000502 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000503 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000504 return false;
505
506 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000507 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000508 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
509 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000510 UsedICmps++;
511 return true;
512 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000513 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000514
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000515 // Pattern match a special case:
516 /*
517 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
518 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
519 );
520 */
521 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
522 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
523 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
524 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
525 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
526 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
527 return false;
528
529 Vals.push_back(C);
530 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
531 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
532 UsedICmps++;
533 return true;
534 }
535 }
536
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000537 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000538 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000539 return false;
540
541 UsedICmps++;
542 Vals.push_back(C);
543 return ICI->getOperand(0);
544 }
545
546 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000547 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
548 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549
550 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
551 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
552 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000553 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
554 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000555 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
556 }
557
558 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
559 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
560 // x != 0 && x != 1.
561 if (!isEQ)
562 Span = Span.inverse();
563
564 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
565 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
566 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000567 }
568
569 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000570 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000571 return false;
572
573 // Add all values from the range to the set
574 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
575 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000576
577 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000578 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000579 }
580
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000581 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000582 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
583 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
584 /// vector.
585 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000586 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000587 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
588 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000589
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000590 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
591 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000592 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000593
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000594 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000595 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000596 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000597
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000598 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000599 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000600
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000601 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
602 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
603 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000604 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
605 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
606 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
607 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000608 continue;
609 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000610
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000611 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000612 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000613 // Match succeed, continue the loop
614 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000615 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000616
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000617 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
618 // comparison against the same value as the others.
619 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
620 if (!Extra) {
621 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000622 continue;
623 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000624 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
625 CompValue = nullptr;
626 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000627 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000628 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000629};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000630}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000631
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000632static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000633 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000634 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
635 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
636 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
637 if (BI->isConditional())
638 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000639 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
640 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000641 }
642
643 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000644 if (Cond)
645 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000646}
647
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000648/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000649/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000650Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000651 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000652 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
653 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
654 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000655 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
656 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
657 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000658 CV = SI->getCondition();
659 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000660 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000661 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000662 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000663 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000664 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000665
666 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000667 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000668 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
669 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000670 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000671 CV = Ptr;
672 }
673 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000674 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000675}
676
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000677/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000678/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000679BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
680 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000681 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000682 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000683 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
684 ++i)
685 Cases.push_back(
686 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000687 return SI->getDefaultDest();
688 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000689
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000690 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000691 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000692 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000693 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
694 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000695 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000696}
697
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000698/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000699/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000700static void
701EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
702 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000703 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000704}
705
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000706/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000707static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
708 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000709 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
710
711 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
712 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
713 std::swap(V1, V2);
714
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000715 if (V1->size() == 0)
716 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000717 if (V1->size() == 1) {
718 // Just scan V2.
719 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
720 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
721 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
722 return true;
723 }
724
725 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
726 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
727 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
728 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
729 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
730 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
731 return true;
732 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
733 ++i1;
734 else
735 ++i2;
736 }
737 return false;
738}
739
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000740/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
741/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
742/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
743/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
744/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000745bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
746 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000747 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000748 if (!PredVal)
749 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000750
751 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
752 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000753 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
754 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000755
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000756 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
757 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
758
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000759 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000760 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000761 BasicBlock *PredDef =
762 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
763 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000764
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000765 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000766 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000767 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000768 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000769
770 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
771 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
772 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
773 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
774 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
775 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000776 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000777 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000778
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000779 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
780 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
781 // uncond br.
782 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
783 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000784 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000785 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000786
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000787 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000788 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000789
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000790 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000791 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
792 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000793
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000794 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
795 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000796 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000797
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000798 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
799 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000800 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000801 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
802 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000803
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000804 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000805 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000806
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000807 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
808 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000809 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000810 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
811 if (HasWeight)
812 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
813 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000814 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000815 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
816 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000817 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
818 --i;
819 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000820 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000821 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000822 Weights.pop_back();
823 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000824 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
825 SI->removeCase(i);
826 }
827 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000828 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000829 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000830 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
831 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000832
833 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000834 return true;
835 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000836
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000837 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
838 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000839 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000840 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000841 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
842 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000843 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000844 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000845 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
846 }
847 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000848
849 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
850 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000851 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000852 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
853 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
854 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
855 break;
856 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000857
858 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000859 if (!TheRealDest)
860 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000861
862 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
863 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000864 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
865 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
866 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000867 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000868 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000869
870 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000871 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000872 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000873
874 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000875 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
876 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000877
878 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
879 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000880}
881
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000882namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000883/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
884/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
885/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
886struct ConstantIntOrdering {
887 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
888 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
889 }
890};
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000891}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000892
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000893static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
894 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
895 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
896 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000897 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000898 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000899 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000900}
901
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000902static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000903 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000904 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000905 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000906 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
907
908 return false;
909}
910
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000911/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
912/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
913/// metadata.
914static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
915 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000916 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000917 assert(MD);
918 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000919 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000920 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000921 }
922
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000923 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
924 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
925 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000926 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000927 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
928 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
929 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
930 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000931 }
932}
933
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000934/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000935static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000936 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
937 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
938 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
939 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
940 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000941 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000942}
943
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000944/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
945/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000946/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
947/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000948bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
949 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000950 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000951 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000952 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
953 bool Changed = false;
954
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000955 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000956 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000957 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000958
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000959 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
960 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000961 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000962
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000963 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000964 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000965 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
966 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
967 std::vector<BasicBlock*> Blocks = { TI->getParent() };
968 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, Blocks, ".fold.split"))
969 return false;
970 }
971 }
972
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000973 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000974 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000975 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
976
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000977 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000978 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
979
980 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
981 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
982 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000983 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000984
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000985 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
986 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000987 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
988 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
989
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000990 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000991 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000992 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000993 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
994 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
995 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000996 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
997 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
998 // successor's weights
999 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001000
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001001 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001002 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001003 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001004 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001005 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1006 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1007 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001008 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001009
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001010 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1011 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1012 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001013 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001014 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1015 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1016 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1017 else {
1018 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1019 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001020
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001021 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1022 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001023 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1024 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001025 Weights.pop_back();
1026 }
1027
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001028 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001029 --i;
1030 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001031 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001032
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001033 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001034 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1035 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1036 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1037 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1038 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001039
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001040 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1041 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001042 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1043 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1044 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1045 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1046 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001047 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1048 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1049 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1050 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001051 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1052 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001053 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001054 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001055
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001056 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1057 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1058 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1059 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1060 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1061 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1062 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1063 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001064 } else {
1065 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1066 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1067 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001068 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1069 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001070 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1071 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1072 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001073
1074 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001075 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1076 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001077 Weights.pop_back();
1078 }
1079
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001080 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1081 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001082 --i;
1083 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001084 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001085
1086 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1087 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001088 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1089 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1090 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001091 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1092 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001093 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1094 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001095 PTIHandled.erase(
1096 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001097 }
1098
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001099 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1100 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001101 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001102 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001103 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1104 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001105 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001106 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001107 }
1108
1109 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1110 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1111 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001112 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1113 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001114
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001115 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001116 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001117 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001118 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001119 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001120 }
1121
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001122 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001123 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1124 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001125 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001126 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1127 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001128
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001129 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1130 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1131 FitWeights(Weights);
1132
1133 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1134
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001135 NewSI->setMetadata(
1136 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1137 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001138 }
1139
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001140 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001141
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001142 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1143 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1144 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001145 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001146 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1147 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001148 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001149 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001150 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001151 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1152 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001153 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001154 }
1155 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1156 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001157
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001158 Changed = true;
1159 }
1160 }
1161 return Changed;
1162}
1163
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001164// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1165// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1166// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001167static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1168 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001169 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001170 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001171 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001172 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1173 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1174 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001175 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001176 return false;
1177 }
1178 }
1179 }
1180 return true;
1181}
1182
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001183static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1184
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001185/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1186/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1187/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001188static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001189 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001190 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1191 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1192 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1193 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1194 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001195 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1196 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001197
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001198 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1199 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1200
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001201 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001202 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1203 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1204 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1205 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1206 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001207 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001208 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001209 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001210 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001211 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001212 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001213 return false;
1214
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001215 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001216
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001217 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001218 do {
1219 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1220 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1221 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1222 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001223
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001224 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1225 return Changed;
1226
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001227 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1228 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1229 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001230 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001231 if (!I2->use_empty())
1232 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Peter Collingbourne8f1dd5c2016-09-07 23:39:04 +00001233 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001234 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1235 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1236 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1237 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1238 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1239 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1240 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1241 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1242 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1243 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001244 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001245
1246 // If the debug loc for I1 and I2 are different, as we are combining them
1247 // into one instruction, we do not want to select debug loc randomly from
1248 // I1 or I2. Instead, we set the 0-line DebugLoc to note that we do not
1249 // know the debug loc of the hoisted instruction.
1250 if (!isa<CallInst>(I1) && I1->getDebugLoc() != I2->getDebugLoc())
1251 I1->setDebugLoc(DebugLoc());
1252
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001253 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001254 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001255
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001256 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1257 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001258 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1259 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1260 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1261 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1262 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001263 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001264 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001265 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001266 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001267 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001268
1269 return true;
1270
1271HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001272 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1273 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001274 return Changed;
1275
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001276 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001277 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001278 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001279 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1280 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1281 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1282 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1283 continue;
1284
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001285 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1286 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1287 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1288 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001289 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001290
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001291 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001292 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001293 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001294 return Changed;
1295 }
1296 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001297
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001298 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001299 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001300 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001301 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001302 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1303 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001304 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001305 }
1306
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001307 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001308 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1309 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1310 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1311 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001312 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001313 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001314 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001315 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001316 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001317 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1318 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001319 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1320 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001321
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001322 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1323 // that determines the right value.
1324 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001325 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001326 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1327 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1328 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001329
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001330 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1331 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1332 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1333 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001334 }
1335 }
1336
1337 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001338 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1339 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001340
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001341 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001342 return true;
1343}
1344
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001345// Is it legal to place a variable in operand \c OpIdx of \c I?
1346// FIXME: This should be promoted to Instruction.
1347static bool canReplaceOperandWithVariable(const Instruction *I,
1348 unsigned OpIdx) {
Hal Finkelac5803b2016-09-07 21:38:22 +00001349 // We can't have a PHI with a metadata type.
1350 if (I->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType()->isMetadataTy())
1351 return false;
1352
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001353 // Early exit.
1354 if (!isa<Constant>(I->getOperand(OpIdx)))
1355 return true;
1356
1357 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
1358 default:
1359 return true;
1360 case Instruction::Call:
1361 case Instruction::Invoke:
1362 // FIXME: many arithmetic intrinsics have no issue taking a
1363 // variable, however it's hard to distingish these from
1364 // specials such as @llvm.frameaddress that require a constant.
Sanjoy Dasbc357e82016-10-12 18:15:33 +00001365 if (isa<IntrinsicInst>(I))
1366 return false;
1367
1368 // Constant bundle operands may need to retain their constant-ness for
1369 // correctness.
1370 if (ImmutableCallSite(I).isBundleOperand(OpIdx))
1371 return false;
1372
1373 return true;
1374
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001375 case Instruction::ShuffleVector:
1376 // Shufflevector masks are constant.
1377 return OpIdx != 2;
1378 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
1379 case Instruction::InsertValue:
1380 // All operands apart from the first are constant.
1381 return OpIdx == 0;
1382 case Instruction::Alloca:
1383 return false;
1384 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
1385 if (OpIdx == 0)
1386 return true;
1387 gep_type_iterator It = std::next(gep_type_begin(I), OpIdx - 1);
1388 return !It->isStructTy();
1389 }
1390}
1391
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001392// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1393// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1394// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1395// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1396// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1397static bool canSinkInstructions(
1398 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1399 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001400 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1401 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1402 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1403 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1404 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1405 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1406 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1407 return false;
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001408 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1409 // have no uses.
1410 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1411 return false;
1412 }
1413
1414 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1415 for (auto *I : Insts)
1416 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1417 return false;
1418
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001419 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1420 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1421 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1422 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001423 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1424 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001425 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1426 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001427 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001428 return (PNUse &&
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001429 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001430 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1431 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001432 }))
1433 return false;
1434 }
1435
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001436 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1437 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1438 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1439 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001440
1441 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1442 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1443 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1444 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1445 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1446 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1447 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1448 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1449 if (OI == 1 && isa<StoreInst>(I0) &&
1450 any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1451 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1452 }))
1453 return false;
1454 if (OI == 0 && isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1455 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1456 }))
1457 return false;
1458
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001459 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001460 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1461 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001462 };
1463 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1464 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1465 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1466 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001467 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1468 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001469 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1470 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001471 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001472 for (auto *I : Insts)
1473 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001474 }
1475 }
1476 return true;
1477}
1478
1479// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1480// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1481// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001482static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001483 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1484
1485 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1486 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1487 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001488 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1489 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1490 do {
1491 I = I->getPrevNode();
1492 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1493 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1494 Insts.push_back(I);
1495 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001496
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001497 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1498 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1499 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1500 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001501 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001502 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1503 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1504 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1505 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1506 return U == PNUse;
1507 }))
1508 return false;
1509 }
1510
1511 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1512 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001513 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1514 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1515 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1516 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1517 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1518 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1519 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1520 // small mess we may make.
1521 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1522 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1523 });
1524 if (!NeedPHI) {
1525 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1526 continue;
1527 }
1528
1529 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1530 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1531 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1532 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1533 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1534 for (auto *I : Insts)
1535 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1536 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1537 }
1538
1539 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1540 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1541 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1542 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1543 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1544
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001545 // Update metadata and IR flags.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001546 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001547 if (I != I0) {
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001548 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001549 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1550 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001551
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001552 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1553 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1554 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1555 // instruction and nuke it.
1556 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1557 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1558 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1559 PN->eraseFromParent();
1560 }
1561
1562 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1563 for (auto *I : Insts)
1564 if (I != I0)
1565 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001566
1567 return true;
1568}
1569
1570namespace {
1571 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1572 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1573 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1574 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1575 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1576 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1577 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1578 // ...
1579 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1580 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1581 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1582 bool Fail;
1583 public:
1584 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) :
1585 Blocks(Blocks) {
1586 reset();
1587 }
1588
1589 void reset() {
1590 Fail = false;
1591 Insts.clear();
1592 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001593 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1594 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1595 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1596 if (!Inst) {
1597 // Block wasn't big enough.
1598 Fail = true;
1599 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001600 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001601 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001602 }
1603 }
1604
1605 bool isValid() const {
1606 return !Fail;
1607 }
1608
1609 void operator -- () {
1610 if (Fail)
1611 return;
1612 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001613 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1614 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001615 // Already at beginning of block.
1616 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001617 Fail = true;
1618 return;
1619 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001620 }
1621 }
1622
1623 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1624 return Insts;
1625 }
1626 };
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001627}
1628
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001629/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001630/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1631/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1632/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1633static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1634 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001635 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1636
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001637 // We support two situations:
1638 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1639 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1640 //
1641 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1642 // else-if patterns;
1643 //
1644 // if (a) f(1);
1645 // else if (b) f(2);
1646 //
1647 // produces:
1648 //
1649 // [if]
1650 // / \
1651 // [f(1)] [if]
1652 // | | \
1653 // | | \
1654 // | [f(2)]|
1655 // \ | /
1656 // [ end ]
1657 //
1658 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1659 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1660 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1661 //
1662 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1663 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1664 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1665 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1666 //
1667 // [if]
1668 // / \
1669 // [x(1)] [if]
1670 // | | \
1671 // | | \
1672 // | [x(2)] |
1673 // \ / |
1674 // [sink.split] |
1675 // \ /
1676 // [ end ]
1677 //
1678 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1679 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
1680 for (auto *B : predecessors(BBEnd)) {
1681 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1682 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1683 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1684 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1685 Cond = T;
1686 else
1687 return false;
1688 }
1689 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001690 return false;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001691
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001692 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001693 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1694 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1695 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1696 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1697 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1698 // PHIOperands.
1699 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1700 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1701 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001702 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001703 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1704 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1705 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1706 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1707 ++ScanIdx;
1708 --LRI;
1709 }
1710
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001711 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001712 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1713 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1714 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1715 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1716 ++NumPHIdValues;
1717 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1718 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1719 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1720 NumPHIInsts++;
1721
1722 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1723 };
1724
1725 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001726 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1727 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1728 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1729 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1730 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1731 LRI.reset();
1732 unsigned Idx = 0;
1733 bool Profitable = false;
1734 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1735 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1736 Profitable = true;
1737 break;
1738 }
1739 --LRI;
1740 ++Idx;
1741 }
1742 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001743 return false;
1744
1745 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
1746 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1747 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
1748 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BI1->getSuccessor(0), UnconditionalPreds,
1749 ".sink.split"))
1750 // Edges couldn't be split.
1751 return false;
1752 Changed = true;
1753 }
1754
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001755 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1756 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1757 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1758 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1759 // per sunk instruction).
1760 //
1761 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1762 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1763 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1764 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1765 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1766 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1767 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1768 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001769 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001770 << "\n");
1771
1772 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1773 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001774 LRI.reset();
1775 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001776 // Too many PHIs would be created.
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001777 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001778 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001779 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001780
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001781 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001782 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001783 NumSinkCommons++;
1784 Changed = true;
1785 }
1786 return Changed;
1787}
1788
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001789/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1790/// conditional block.
1791///
1792/// We are looking for code like the following:
1793/// BrBB:
1794/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1795/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1796/// ... // function).
1797/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1798/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1799/// ThenBB:
1800/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1801/// br label EndBB
1802/// EndBB:
1803/// ...
1804/// We are going to transform this into:
1805/// BrBB:
1806/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1807/// ... //
1808/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1809/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1810/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1811/// ...
1812///
1813/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1814/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001815static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1816 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001817 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1818 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001819 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001820
1821 // Volatile or atomic.
1822 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001823 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001824
1825 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1826
1827 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001828 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001829 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1830 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1831 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001832 // Skip debug info.
1833 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1834 continue;
1835 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001836
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001837 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001838 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001839 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001840
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001841 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1842 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1843 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1844 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1845 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001846 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001847 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001848 }
1849
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001850 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001851}
1852
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001853/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001854///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001855/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1856/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1857/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1858/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1859/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1860///
1861/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1862/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1863/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1864/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1865///
1866///
1867/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1868/// \code
1869/// BB:
1870/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1871/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1872/// ThenBB:
1873/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001874/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001875/// EndBB:
1876/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1877/// ...
1878/// \endcode
1879///
1880/// Into this IR:
1881/// \code
1882/// BB:
1883/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1884/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1885/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1886/// ...
1887/// \endcode
1888///
1889/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001890static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001891 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001892 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1893 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1894 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1895 return false;
1896
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001897 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1898 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1899
1900 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1901 // to swap the select operands later.
1902 bool Invert = false;
1903 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1904 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1905 Invert = true;
1906 }
1907 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1908
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001909 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1910 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1911 // - They are defined in BB, and
1912 // - They have no side effects, and
1913 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1914 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1915
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001916 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001917 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1918 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001919 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001920 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001921 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001922 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001923 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001924 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1925 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001926
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001927 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001928 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001929 ++SpeculationCost;
1930 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001931 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001932
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001933 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001934 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1935 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1936 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001937 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001938 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001939 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1940 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001941 return false;
1942
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001943 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1944 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1945 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1946
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001947 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001948 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001949 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001950 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001951 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001952 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001953 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1954
1955 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001956 }
1957 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001958
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001959 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1960 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1961 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001962 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1963 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1964 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001965 I != E; ++I)
1966 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001967 ++SpeculationCost;
1968 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001969 return false;
1970 }
1971
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001972 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1973 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001974 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001975 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001976 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1977 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001978
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001979 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001980 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001981 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001982 continue;
1983
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001984 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1985 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1986 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1987 return false;
1988
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001989 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001990 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1991 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1992 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001993 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1994
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001995 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1996 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001997 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001998 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1999 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002000 unsigned MaxCost =
2001 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002002 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002003 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002004
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002005 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2006 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2007 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002008 // constant expression.
2009 ++SpeculationCost;
2010 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002011 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002012 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002013
2014 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2015 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002016 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002017 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002018
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002019 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002020 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002021
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002022 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2023 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002024 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002025 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2026 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2027 if (Invert)
2028 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002029 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
2030 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002031 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
2032 }
2033
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002034 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2035 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002036 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002037 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2038
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002039 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002040 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2041 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002042
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002043 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002044 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002045 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
2046 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
2047 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2048 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2049 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2050 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
2051
2052 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2053 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2054 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002055
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002056 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002057 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2058 // destinations were inverted.
2059 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002060 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002061 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002062 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
2063 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002064 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2065 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002066 }
2067
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002068 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002069 return true;
2070}
2071
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002072/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002073static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2074 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002075 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002076
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00002077 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002078 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2079 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002080 if (Size > 10)
2081 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002082 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002083
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002084 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002085 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002086 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
2087 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002088 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2089 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002090 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002091
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002092 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2093 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002094
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002095 return true;
2096}
2097
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002098/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2099/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2100/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002101static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002102 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2103 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002104 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2105 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002106 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2107 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002108
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002109 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2110 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002111 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002112 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002113 }
2114
2115 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002116 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2117 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002118
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002119 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002120 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002121 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2122 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2123 }))
2124 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002125
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002126 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2127 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002128 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002129 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002130 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2131 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002132
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002133 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2134 // branch to RealDest.
2135 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2136 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002137
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002138 if (RealDest == BB)
2139 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002140 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002141 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2142 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002143
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002144 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2145 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2146 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2147 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002148 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2149 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2150 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002151 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002152
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002153 // Update PHI nodes.
2154 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002155
2156 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2157 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2158 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2159 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002160 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002161 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2162 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2163 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2164 continue;
2165 }
2166 // Clone the instruction.
2167 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002168 if (BBI->hasName())
2169 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002170
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002171 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002172 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2173 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002174 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2175 *i = PI->second;
2176 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002177
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002178 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002179 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002180 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2181 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2182 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2183 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
2184 N = nullptr;
2185 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002186 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002187 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002188 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002189 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002190 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2191 if (N)
2192 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002193 }
2194
2195 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2196 // to EdgeBB instead.
2197 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2198 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2199 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2200 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2201 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2202 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002203
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002204 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002205 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002206 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002207
2208 return false;
2209}
2210
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002211/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2212/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002213static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2214 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002215 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2216 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2217 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2218 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2219 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2220 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002221 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2222 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2223 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002224 if (!IfCond ||
2225 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2226 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2227 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002228
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002229 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2230 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2231 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2232 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2233 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2234 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2235 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2236 if (NumPhis > 2)
2237 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002238
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002239 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2240 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2241 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002242 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002243 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2244 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002245 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2246 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002247
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002248 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2249 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002250 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002251 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002252 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002253 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002254 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002255
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002256 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002257 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002258 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002259 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002260 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002261 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002262
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002263 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002264 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2265 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002266 if (!PN)
2267 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002268
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002269 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2270 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2271 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2272 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2273 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2274 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2275 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002276
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002277 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2278 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2279 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2280 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002281 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002282 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2283 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2284 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002285 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002286 } else {
2287 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002288 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2289 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002290 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002291 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002292 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2293 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002294 return false;
2295 }
2296 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002297
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002298 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002299 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002300 } else {
2301 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002302 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2303 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002304 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002305 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002306 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2307 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002308 return false;
2309 }
2310 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002311
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002312 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002313 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002314
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002315 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2316 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002317 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002318 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002319
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002320 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2321 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002322 if (IfBlock1) {
2323 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2324 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002325 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002326 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002327 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002328 }
2329 if (IfBlock2) {
2330 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2331 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002332 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002333 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002334 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002335 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002336
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002337 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2338 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002339 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002340 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002341
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002342 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2343 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2344 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002345 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002346 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002347
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002348 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2349 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2350 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2351 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002352 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2353 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002354 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002355 return true;
2356}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002357
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002358/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2359/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002360/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002361static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002362 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002363 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2364 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2365 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2366 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2367 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002368
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002369 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2370 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2371 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002372 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002373 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002374 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002375 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002376
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002377 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002378 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2379 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2380 // branch into a return.
2381 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2382 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2383 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002384 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002385 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002386 return true;
2387 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002388
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002389 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2390 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2391 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2392 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002393
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002394 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2395 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2396 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2397 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2398 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2399 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2400 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002401
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002402 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2403 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2404 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2405 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2406 // safe.
2407 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2408 if (TCV->canTrap())
2409 return false;
2410 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2411 if (FCV->canTrap())
2412 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002413
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002414 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2415 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2416 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2417 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002418
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002419 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2420 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002421 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002422 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002423 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2424 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2425 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2426 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002427 TrueValue =
2428 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002429 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002430 }
2431
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002432 Value *RI =
2433 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002434
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002435 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002436
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002437 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002438 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002439 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002440
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002441 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2442
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002443 return true;
2444}
2445
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002446/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002447/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002448static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002449 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2450 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002451 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2452 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002453 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2454 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2455 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2456 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2457 return true;
2458 }
2459 }
2460 return false;
2461}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002462
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002463/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2464/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2465/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2466static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2467 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2468 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2469 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2470 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2471 bool PredHasWeights =
2472 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2473 bool SuccHasWeights =
2474 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2475 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2476 if (!PredHasWeights)
2477 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2478 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2479 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2480 return true;
2481 } else {
2482 return false;
2483 }
2484}
2485
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002486/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2487/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2488/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002489bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002490 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002491
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002492 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002493 if (BI->isConditional())
2494 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2495 else {
2496 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2497 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2498 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2499 // predecessor.
2500 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2501 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2502 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2503 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2504 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002505 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002506 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002507 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2508 Cond = Curr;
2509 break;
2510 }
2511 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2512 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2513 return false;
2514 }
2515 }
2516
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002517 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002518 return false;
2519 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002520
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002521 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2522 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002523 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002524
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002525 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002526 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002527
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002528 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002529 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2530 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002531
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002532 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002533 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002534
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002535 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2536 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2537 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2538 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2539 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2540 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002541 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002542 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2543 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2544 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002545 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002546 return false;
2547 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2548 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2549 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2550 return false;
2551 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2552 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2553 // and Cond.
2554 ++NumBonusInsts;
2555 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2556 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2557 return false;
2558 }
2559
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002560 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2561 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2562 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2563 if (CE->canTrap())
2564 return false;
2565 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2566 if (CE->canTrap())
2567 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002568
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002569 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002570 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002571 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002572 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2573 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002574
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002575 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2576 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002577 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002578
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002579 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2580 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2581 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002582 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002583 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002584 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002585 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2586 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002587 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002588
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002589 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002590 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002591 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002592
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002593 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002594 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002595 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002596 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002597 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002598 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2599 Opc = Instruction::And;
2600 InvertPredCond = true;
2601 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2602 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2603 InvertPredCond = true;
2604 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002605 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002606 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002607 } else {
2608 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2609 continue;
2610 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002611
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002612 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002613 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002614
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002615 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2616 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002617 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002618
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002619 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2620 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2621 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2622 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002623 NewCond =
2624 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002625 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002626
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002627 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002628 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002629 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002630
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002631 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002632 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002633 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2634 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2635 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002636 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002637 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002638 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002639 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2640 continue;
2641 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2642 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002643 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002644 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002645
2646 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2647 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2648 // only given the branch precondition.
2649 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2650 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002651 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002652
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002653 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2654 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002655 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002656 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002657
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002658 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2659 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002660 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002661 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002662 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002663 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002664 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002665 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002666
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002667 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002668 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2669 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002670 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2671
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002672 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002673 bool HasWeights =
2674 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2675 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002676 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2677
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002678 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002679 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002680 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2681 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002682 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002683 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002684 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002685 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2686 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2687 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002688 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2689 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2690 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002691 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002692 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2693 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2694 }
2695 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002696 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002697 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2698 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002699 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002700 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002701 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2702 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2703 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2704 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002705 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2706 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002707 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2708 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2709 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002710 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2711 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2712 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2713
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002714 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2715 NewWeights.end());
2716 PBI->setMetadata(
2717 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2718 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002719 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002720 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002721 } else {
2722 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2723 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002724 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002725 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002726 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002727 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002728 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2729 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2730 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2731 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002732 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2733 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2734 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2735 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002736 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002737 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2738 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002739 } else {
2740 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2741 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2742 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002743 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2744 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002745 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002746 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2747 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2748 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2749 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002750 }
2751 }
2752 // Update PHI Node.
2753 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2754 MergedCond);
2755 }
2756 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2757 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2758 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2759 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002760 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002761
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002762 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2763 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2764
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002765 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002766 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2767 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2768 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002769
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002770 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002771 }
2772 return false;
2773}
2774
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002775// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2776// nullptr.
2777static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2778 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2779 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2780 if (!BB)
2781 continue;
2782 for (auto &I : *BB)
2783 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2784 if (S)
2785 // Multiple stores seen.
2786 return nullptr;
2787 else
2788 S = SI;
2789 }
2790 }
2791 return S;
2792}
2793
2794static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2795 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2796 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2797 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2798 //
2799 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2800 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2801 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2802 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2803 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2804 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2805 // one.
2806 //
2807 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2808 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2809 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2810 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2811 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002812
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002813 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2814 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2815 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2816 if (!AlternativeV)
2817 break;
2818
2819 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2820 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2821 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2822 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2823 break;
2824 PHI = nullptr;
2825 }
2826 if (PHI)
2827 return PHI;
2828
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002829 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2830 if (!AlternativeV &&
2831 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2832 return V;
2833
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002834 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002835 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2836 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2837 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002838 PHI->addIncoming(
2839 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002840 return PHI;
2841}
2842
2843static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2844 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2845 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2846 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2847 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2848 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2849 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2850 };
2851
2852 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2853 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2854 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2855 if (!BB)
2856 return true;
2857 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2858 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2859 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002860 unsigned N = 0;
2861 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2862 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2863 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2864 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2865 ++N;
2866 // Free instructions.
2867 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2868 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2869 continue;
2870 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002871 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002872 }
2873 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002874 };
2875
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002876 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2877 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2878 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002879 return false;
2880
2881 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2882 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2883 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2884 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2885 // testing.
2886 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2887 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2888 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2889 return false;
2890
2891 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2892 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2893 return false;
2894
2895 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2896 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2897 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2898 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2899 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2900 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2901 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2902 //
2903 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2904 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2905 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2906 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2907 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2908 return false;
2909 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2910 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2911 return false;
2912 if (QTB)
2913 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2914 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2915 return false;
2916 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2917 I != E; ++I)
2918 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2919 return false;
2920
2921 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2922 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2923 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2924 ->getCondition();
2925 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2926 ->getCondition();
2927
2928 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2929 PStore->getParent());
2930 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2931 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2932
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002933 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2934
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002935 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2936 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2937
2938 if (InvertPCond)
2939 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2940 if (InvertQCond)
2941 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2942 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2943
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002944 auto *T =
2945 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002946 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2947 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2948 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2949 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2950 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2951 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2952
2953 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2954 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002955
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002956 return true;
2957}
2958
2959static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2960 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2961 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2962 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2963 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2964 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2965 // PBI and QBI.
2966 //
2967 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2968 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2969 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2970 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2971 //
2972 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2973 //
2974 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2975 // / \ | \
2976 // PTB PFB | PFB
2977 // \ / | /
2978 // QBI QBI
2979 // / \ | \
2980 // QTB QFB | QFB
2981 // \ / | /
2982 // PostBB PostBB
2983 //
2984 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2985 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2986 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002987 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002988 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2989 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2990 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2991 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2992 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2993
2994 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2995 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2996 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2997 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2998 InvertPCond = true;
2999 }
3000 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3001 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3002 InvertQCond = true;
3003 }
3004
3005 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3006 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3007 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3008 PTB = nullptr;
3009 if (QTB == PostBB)
3010 QTB = nullptr;
3011
3012 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3013 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3014 // predecessor.
3015 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003016 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003017 };
3018 if (!PostBB ||
3019 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
3020 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3021 return false;
3022 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3023 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3024 return false;
3025 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
3026 return false;
3027
3028 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3029 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003030 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003031 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3032 if (!BB)
3033 continue;
3034 for (auto &I : *BB)
3035 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3036 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3037 }
3038 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3039 if (!BB)
3040 continue;
3041 for (auto &I : *BB)
3042 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3043 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3044 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003045
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003046 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3047 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3048 // clear what it contains.
3049 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3050
3051 bool Changed = false;
3052 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3053 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
3054 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
3055 return Changed;
3056}
3057
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003058/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3059/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003060/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3061/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003062static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3063 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003064 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3065 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003066
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003067 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003068 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003069 // this conditional branch redundant.
3070 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3071 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3072 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3073 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3074 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3075 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3076 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003077 BI->setCondition(
3078 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3079 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003080 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003081
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003082 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3083 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3084 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3085 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003086 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003087 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3088 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3089 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003090 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3091 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3092 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003093 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003094 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003095 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3096 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003097 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3098 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003099 NewPN->addIncoming(
3100 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3101 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003102 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003103 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003104 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003105 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003106
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003107 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003108 return true;
3109 }
3110 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003111
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003112 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3113 if (CE->canTrap())
3114 return false;
3115
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003116 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3117 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3118 // merged store at the end.
3119 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
3120 return true;
3121
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003122 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003123 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003124 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003125 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3126 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3127 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3128 ++BBI;
3129 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003130 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003131
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003132 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003133 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3134 PBIOp = 0;
3135 BIOp = 0;
3136 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3137 PBIOp = 0;
3138 BIOp = 1;
3139 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3140 PBIOp = 1;
3141 BIOp = 0;
3142 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3143 PBIOp = 1;
3144 BIOp = 1;
3145 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003146 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003147 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003148
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003149 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3150 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3151 // keep getting unwound.
3152 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3153 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003154
3155 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003156 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3157 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003158
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003159 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3160 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3161 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3162
3163 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003164 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003165 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3166 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003167 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3168 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003169
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003170 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3171 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3172 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3173 if (CE->canTrap())
3174 return false;
3175
3176 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3177 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3178 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3179 if (CE->canTrap())
3180 return false;
3181 }
3182
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003183 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003184 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003185
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003186 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003187 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003188
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003189 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3190 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3191 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3192 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3193 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3194 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3195 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3196 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3197 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3198 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003199 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3200 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003201 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3202 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003203 }
3204
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003205 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003206
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003207 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3208 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003209
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003210 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3211 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003212 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003213 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003214 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003215
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003216 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3217 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003218 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003219
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003220 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003221 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003222
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003223 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3224 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3225 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3226 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003227
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003228 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3229 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003230 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003231 bool HasWeights =
3232 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3233 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003234 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003235 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3236 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3237 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3238 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003239 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3240 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3241 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003242 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3243 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3244 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003245 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003246 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3247
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003248 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003249 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3250 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003251 }
3252
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003253 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3254 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003255 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003256
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003257 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3258 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3259 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3260 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003261 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003262 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3263 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3264 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3265 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3266 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3267 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3268 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003269 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3270 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003271 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003272 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3273 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3274 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3275 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003276 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003277 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3278 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3279 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3280 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3281 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3282 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3283 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3284 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3285
3286 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3287
3288 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3289 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3290 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3291 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003292 }
3293 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003294
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003295 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3296 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003297
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003298 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3299 // one fewer predecessor.
3300 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003301}
3302
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003303// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3304// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003305// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3306// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3307// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3308static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003309 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3310 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003311 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003312 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3313 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3314 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3315 // successor.
3316 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003317 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003318
3319 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003320 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003321 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3322 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003323 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003324 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003325 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003326 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003327 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3328 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003329 }
3330
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003331 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3332 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3333
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003334 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003335 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003336 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3337 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3338 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003339 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003340 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003341 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3342 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003343 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3344 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3345 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003346 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3347 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003348 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003349 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3350 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3351 // terminator must be unreachable.
3352 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3353 } else {
3354 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3355 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3356 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003357 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003358 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003359 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003360 else
3361 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003362 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003363 }
3364
3365 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3366 return true;
3367}
3368
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003369// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003370// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3371// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3372// unconditional otherwise.
3373static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3374 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3375 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3376 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3377 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3378 return false;
3379
3380 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3381 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003382 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3383 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003384
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003385 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3386 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3387 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3388 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3389 if (HasWeights) {
3390 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3391 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003392 TrueWeight =
3393 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3394 FalseWeight =
3395 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003396 }
3397 }
3398
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003399 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003400 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3401 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003402}
3403
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003404// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003405// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3406// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3407// with
3408// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3409static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3410 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3411 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3412 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3413 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3414 return false;
3415
3416 // Extract the actual blocks.
3417 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3418 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3419
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003420 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003421 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3422 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003423}
3424
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003425/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3426/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003427/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3428/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3429/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3430/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3431/// like:
3432///
3433/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3434/// DEFAULT:
3435/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3436/// br label %end
3437/// end:
3438/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003439///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003440/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3441/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003442static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003443 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3444 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3445 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003446 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003447
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003448 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3449 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003450 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3451 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003452
3453 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3454 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003455
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003456 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3457 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3458 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3459 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003460 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3461 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003462
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003463 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3464 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3465 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003466
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003467 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3468 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3469 // away.
3470 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3471 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3472 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3473 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003474
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003475 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003476 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003477 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3478 }
3479 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003480 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003481 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003482
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003483 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3484 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3485 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003486 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003487 Value *V;
3488 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3489 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3490 else
3491 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003492
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003493 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3494 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3495 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003496 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003497 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003498
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003499 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3500 // the block.
3501 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003502 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003503 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003504 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3505 return false;
3506
3507 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3508 // true in the PHI.
3509 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003510 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003511
3512 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3513 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3514
3515 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3516 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3517 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3518 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3519
3520 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3521 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003522 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3523 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003524 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3525 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3526 if (HasWeights) {
3527 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3528 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3529 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003530 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003531 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3532
3533 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003534 SI->setMetadata(
3535 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3536 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003537 }
3538 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003539 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003540
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003541 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003542 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3543 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3544 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003545 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3546 return true;
3547}
3548
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003549/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003550/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3551/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003552static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3553 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003554 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003555 if (!Cond)
3556 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003557
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003558 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3559 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3560 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003561
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003562 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003563 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3564 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003565 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003566 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3567 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3568 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003569
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003570 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003571 if (!CompVal)
3572 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003573
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003574 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3575 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3576 return false;
3577
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003578 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3579
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003580 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3581 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3582 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3583 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003584
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003585 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003586 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003587 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3588 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003589
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003590 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3591 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3592
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003593 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3594 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003595 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3596 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3597 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003598
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003599 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003600
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003601 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003602 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3603 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003604
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003605 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3606 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3607 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3608 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003609 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3610 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003611 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3612 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003613 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3614
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003615 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003616 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003617 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003618 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003619
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003620 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003621
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003622 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3623 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003624 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003625
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003626 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003627 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003628 BB = NewBB;
3629 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003630
3631 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003632 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3633 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003634 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3635 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003636 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003637
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003638 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003639 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003640
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003641 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3642 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3643 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003644
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003645 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3646 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3647 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003648 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003649 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3650 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003651 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003652 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3653 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003654
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003655 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3656 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003657
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003658 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003659 return true;
3660}
3661
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003662bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003663 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3664 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3665 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3666 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3667 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3668 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003669
3670 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003671}
3672
3673// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3674bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3675 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3676
3677 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3678 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3679 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003680 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003681 while (++I != E)
3682 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3683 return false;
3684
3685 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3686 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3687
3688 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003689 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3690 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003691 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3692 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3693
3694 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3695 // it has other dependents.
3696 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3697 continue;
3698
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003699 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003700 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3701 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3702 continue;
3703
3704 bool isTrivial = true;
3705
3706 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3707 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3708 while (++I != E)
3709 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3710 isTrivial = false;
3711 break;
3712 }
3713
3714 if (isTrivial)
3715 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3716 }
3717
3718 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003719 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3720 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003721
3722 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3723 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3724 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3725 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3726 // to remove them all.
3727 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3728 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3729
3730 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3731 PI != PE;) {
3732 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3733 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3734 }
3735
3736 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3737 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3738 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3739 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3740 // predecessors.
3741 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3742 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3743 }
3744
3745 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3746 if (pred_empty(BB))
3747 BB->eraseFromParent();
3748
3749 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3750}
3751
3752// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3753bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003754 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3755 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003756 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3757 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003758
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003759 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3760 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003761 while (++I != E)
3762 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3763 return false;
3764
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003765 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003766 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3767 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3768 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003769 }
3770
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003771 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3772 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003773 if (LoopHeaders)
3774 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003775 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003776}
3777
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003778static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003779 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3780 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3781 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3782 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3783 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3784 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3785 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3786 // simplified.
3787 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003788 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3789 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003790 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3791 return false;
3792
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003793 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3794 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3795 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3796 return false;
3797
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003798 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003799 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003800 while (++I != E) {
3801 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3802 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003803 return false;
3804
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003805 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3806 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3807 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3808 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3809 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3810 break;
3811 default:
3812 return false;
3813 }
3814 }
3815
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003816 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3817 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003818 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003819 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003820
3821 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3822 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3823 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3824 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3825 // are both EH pads).
3826 if (UnwindDest) {
3827 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3828 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003829 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003830 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003831 I != IE; ++I) {
3832 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003833
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003834 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003835 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003836 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003837 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3838 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3839 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3840 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3841 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3842 // pad being removed.
3843 //
3844 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3845 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3846 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3847 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3848 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3849 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3850
3851 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3852 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3853
3854 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3855 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3856 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3857 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003858 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003859 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003860 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3861 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3862 }
3863 } else {
3864 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3865 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3866 // predecessors with this value.
3867 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3868 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3869 }
3870 }
3871 }
3872
3873 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003874 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003875 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3876 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003877 I != IE;) {
3878 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3879 // being moved to another block.
3880 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3881 if (PN->use_empty())
3882 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3883 // when we erase BB below.
3884 continue;
3885
3886 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3887 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3888 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3889 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3890 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3891 if (pred != BB)
3892 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3893 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3894 }
3895 }
3896
3897 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3898 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3899 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003900 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003901 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003902 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003903 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003904 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003905 }
3906 }
3907
3908 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3909 BB->eraseFromParent();
3910 return true;
3911}
3912
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003913// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3914static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3915 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3916 // with.
3917 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3918 if (!UnwindDest)
3919 return false;
3920
3921 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3922 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3923 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3924 return false;
3925
3926 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3927 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3928 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3929 return false;
3930
3931 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3932 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3933 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3934 // funclet bundle operands.
3935 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3936 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3937 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3938 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3939 // destination.
3940 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3941 RI->eraseFromParent();
3942
3943 return true;
3944}
3945
3946bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003947 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3948 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3949 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3950 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3951 return false;
3952
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003953 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003954 return true;
3955
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003956 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003957 return true;
3958
3959 return false;
3960}
3961
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003962bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003963 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003964 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
3965 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003966
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003967 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003968 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3969 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003970 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3971 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003972 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3973 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3974 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3975 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3976 else
3977 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3978 }
3979 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003980
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003981 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003982 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003983 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3984 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3985 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003986 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003987 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003988 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003989
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003990 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003991 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003992 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3993 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003994 if (LoopHeaders)
3995 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003996 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003997
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003998 return true;
3999 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004000
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004001 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4002 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4003 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4004 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4005 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004006
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004007 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4008 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4009 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004010 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004011 return true;
4012 }
4013 return false;
4014}
4015
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004016bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4017 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004018
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004019 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004020
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004021 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4022 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004023 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4024 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004025 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004026 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4027 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4028 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004029 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4030 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004031
4032 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004033 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004034 if (SI->isVolatile())
4035 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004036 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004037 if (LI->isVolatile())
4038 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004039 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004040 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4041 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004042 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004043 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4044 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004045 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4046 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4047 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4048 // default.
4049 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4050 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4051 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4052 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004053 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4054 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004055 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004056 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004057 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4058 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4059 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4060 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004061 }
4062
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004063 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4064 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4065 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004066 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004067 Changed = true;
4068 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004069
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004070 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4071 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004072 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4073 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004074
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004075 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004076 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4077 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004078 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004079 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004080 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4081 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4082 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4083 TI->eraseFromParent();
4084 Changed = true;
4085 }
4086 } else {
4087 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004088 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004089 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4090 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004091 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004092 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4093 Changed = true;
4094 }
4095 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004096 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004097 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
4098 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004099 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004100 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4101 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004102 --i;
4103 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004104 Changed = true;
4105 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004106 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4107 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4108 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4109 Changed = true;
4110 }
4111 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4112 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4113 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4114 Changed = true;
4115 continue;
4116 }
4117
4118 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4119 E = CSI->handler_end();
4120 I != E; ++I) {
4121 if (*I == BB) {
4122 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4123 --I;
4124 --E;
4125 Changed = true;
4126 }
4127 }
4128 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4129 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4130 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4131 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4132 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4133 } else {
4134 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4135 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4136 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4137 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4138 }
4139 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4140 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4141 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4142 Changed = true;
4143 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004144 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004145 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4146 TI->eraseFromParent();
4147 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004148 }
4149 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004150
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004151 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004152 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004153 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4154 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004155 if (LoopHeaders)
4156 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004157 return true;
4158 }
4159
4160 return Changed;
4161}
4162
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004163static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4164 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4165
4166 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4167 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4168 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4169 return false;
4170 }
4171 return true;
4172}
4173
4174/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4175/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004176static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004177 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004178
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004179 bool HasDefault =
4180 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004181
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004182 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4183 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4184 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004185 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4186 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004187
4188 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
4189 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004190 if (!DestA)
4191 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004192 if (Dest == DestA) {
4193 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4194 continue;
4195 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004196 if (!DestB)
4197 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004198 if (Dest == DestB) {
4199 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4200 continue;
4201 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004202 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004203 }
4204
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004205 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4206 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004207 assert(DestA != DestB);
4208 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4209 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4210 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4211
4212 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4213 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4214 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4215 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4216 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4217 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4218 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4219 OtherDest = DestB;
4220 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4221 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4222 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4223 OtherDest = DestA;
4224 } else
4225 return false;
4226
4227 // Start building the compare and branch.
4228
4229 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004230 Constant *NumCases =
4231 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004232
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004233 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4234 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004235 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4236
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004237 Value *Cmp;
4238 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004239 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004240 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4241 else
4242 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004243 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004244
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004245 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004246 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4247 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004248 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4249 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004250 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4251 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4252 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4253 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4254 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4255 else
4256 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4257 }
4258 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4259 TrueWeight /= 2;
4260 FalseWeight /= 2;
4261 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004262 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004263 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4264 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4265 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004266 }
4267 }
4268
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004269 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4270 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4271 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004272 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4273 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004274 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004275 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4276 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004277 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4278 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004279 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4280 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004281 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4282 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4283 }
4284
4285 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004286 SI->eraseFromParent();
4287
4288 return true;
4289}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004290
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004291/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004292/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004293static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
4294 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004295 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004296 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004297 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004298 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004299
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004300 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4301 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4302 // bits are in the condition value.
4303 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
4304 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4305
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004306 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004307 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004308 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004309 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4310 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4311 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004312 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004313 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004314 }
4315 }
4316
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004317 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4318 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004319 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4320 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004321 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004322 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4323 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4324 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004325 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004326 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004327 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004328 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004329 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004330 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4331 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004332 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4333 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004334 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4335 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4336 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4337 return true;
4338 }
4339
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004340 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4341 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4342 if (HasWeight) {
4343 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4344 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4345 }
4346
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004347 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004348 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4349 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004350 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004351 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004352 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004353 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004354 Weights.pop_back();
4355 }
4356
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004357 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004358 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004359 SI->removeCase(Case);
4360 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004361 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004362 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4363 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004364 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4365 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004366 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004367
4368 return !DeadCases.empty();
4369}
4370
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004371/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4372/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004373/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4374/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4375/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4376static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004377 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004378 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004379 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004380 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004381 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004382
4383 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4384 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004385 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004386
4387 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4388
4389 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4390 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4391 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4392 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4393
4394 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004395 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4396 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004397
4398 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4399 return PHI;
4400 }
4401
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004402 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004403}
4404
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004405/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4406/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4407/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004408/// Returns true if a change is made.
4409static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004410 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004411 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4412
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004413 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4414 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004415 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4416 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004417
4418 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004419 PHINode *PHI =
4420 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4421 if (!PHI)
4422 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004423
4424 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4425 }
4426
4427 bool Changed = false;
4428
4429 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004430 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4431 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004432 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004433 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004434
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004435 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4436 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004437
4438 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4439 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4440 Changed = true;
4441 }
4442
4443 return Changed;
4444}
4445
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004446/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004447/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004448static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004449 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4450 return false;
4451 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4452 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004453
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004454 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4455 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4456 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4457 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004458
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004459 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004460 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4461 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004462 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4463 return false;
4464 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004465
4466 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4467 return false;
4468
4469 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004470}
4471
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004472/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004473/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004474static Constant *
4475LookupConstant(Value *V,
4476 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004477 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4478 return C;
4479 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4480}
4481
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004482/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004483/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4484/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004485/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004486static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004487ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4488 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004489 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004490 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4491 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004492 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004493 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4494 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4495 if (A->isNullValue())
4496 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004497 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004498 }
4499
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004500 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4501 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4502 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4503 COps.push_back(A);
4504 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004505 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004506 }
4507
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004508 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004509 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4510 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004511 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004512
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004513 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004514}
4515
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004516/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004517/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004518/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004519/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004520static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004521GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004522 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004523 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *> > &Res,
4524 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004525 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4526 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4527
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004528 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4529 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004530 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004531 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4532 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4533 ++I) {
4534 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4535 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004536 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004537 return false;
4538 Pred = CaseDest;
4539 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4540 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4541 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4542 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004543 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004544 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004545
4546 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4547 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4548 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4549 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4550 User *User = Use.getUser();
4551 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4552 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4553 continue;
4554 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4555 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4556 continue;
4557 return false;
4558 }
4559
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004560 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004561 } else {
4562 break;
4563 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004564 }
4565
4566 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4567 if (!*CommonDest)
4568 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4569 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4570 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4571 return false;
4572
4573 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4574 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4575 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4576 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4577 if (Idx == -1)
4578 continue;
4579
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004580 Constant *ConstVal =
4581 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004582 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004583 return false;
4584
4585 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004586 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004587 return false;
4588
4589 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4590 }
4591
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004592 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004593}
4594
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004595// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4596// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004597static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004598 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4599 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004600 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4601 if (I.first == Result) {
4602 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4603 return;
4604 }
4605 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004606 UniqueResults.push_back(
4607 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004608}
4609
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004610// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004611// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4612// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4613// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004614static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4615 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4616 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4617 Constant *&DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004618 const DataLayout &DL,
4619 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004620 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4621 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4622
4623 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4624 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4625 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004626 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004627 return false;
4628
4629 // Only one value per case is permitted
4630 if (Results.size() > 1)
4631 return false;
4632 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4633
4634 // Check the PHI consistency.
4635 if (!PHI)
4636 PHI = Results[0].first;
4637 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4638 return false;
4639 }
4640 // Find the default result value.
4641 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4642 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4643 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004644 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004645 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4646 // is unreachable.
4647 DefaultResult =
4648 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4649 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004650 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004651 return false;
4652
4653 return true;
4654}
4655
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004656// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4657// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004658// Example:
4659// switch (a) {
4660// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4661// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4662// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4663// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4664// default:
4665// return 4;
4666// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004667static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4668 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4669 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004670 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004671 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004672 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4673 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4674 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4675 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4676 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4677 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4678
4679 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4680 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4681 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4682 Value *const ValueCompare =
4683 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4684 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4685 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4686 }
4687 Value *const ValueCompare =
4688 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004689 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4690 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004691 }
4692
4693 return nullptr;
4694}
4695
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004696// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4697// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004698static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4699 Value *SelectValue,
4700 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4701 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4702 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4703 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4704 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4705
4706 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4707
4708 // Remove the switch.
4709 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4710 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4711
4712 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4713 continue;
4714 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4715 }
4716 SI->eraseFromParent();
4717}
4718
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004719/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004720/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4721/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4722static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004723 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL,
4724 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004725 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4726 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4727 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4728 Constant *DefaultResult;
4729 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4730 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004731 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004732 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004733 return false;
4734 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4735 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4736 return false;
4737 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4738
4739 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004740 Value *SelectValue =
4741 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004742 if (SelectValue) {
4743 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4744 return true;
4745 }
4746 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4747 return false;
4748}
4749
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004750namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004751/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4752class SwitchLookupTable {
4753public:
4754 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4755 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4756 SwitchLookupTable(
4757 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4758 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4759 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004760
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004761 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4762 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4763 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004764
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004765 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4766 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4767 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4768 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004769
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004770private:
4771 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4772 // different ways.
4773 enum {
4774 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4775 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4776 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004777
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004778 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4779 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4780 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4781 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004782
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004783 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4784 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4785 // shift and mask operations.
4786 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004787
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004788 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4789 // instructions from the table.
4790 ArrayKind
4791 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004792
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004793 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4794 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004795
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004796 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4797 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4798 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004799
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004800 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4801 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4802 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004803
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004804 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4805 GlobalVariable *Array;
4806};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004807}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004808
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004809SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4810 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4811 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4812 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004813 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004814 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004815 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4816 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004817
4818 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004819 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004820
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004821 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4822
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004823 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004824 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004825 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4826 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4827 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004828 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004829
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004830 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004831 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4832
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004833 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004834 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004835 }
4836
4837 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004838 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004839 assert(DefaultValue &&
4840 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004841 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004842 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4843 if (!TableContents[I])
4844 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004845 }
4846
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004847 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004848 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004849 }
4850
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004851 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4852 // that single value.
4853 if (SingleValue) {
4854 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4855 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004856 }
4857
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004858 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4859 // table index.
4860 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4861 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4862 APInt PrevVal;
4863 APInt DistToPrev;
4864 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4865 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4866 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4867 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4868 if (!ConstVal) {
4869 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4870 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4871 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4872 break;
4873 }
4874 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4875 if (I != 0) {
4876 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4877 if (I == 1) {
4878 DistToPrev = Dist;
4879 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4880 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4881 break;
4882 }
4883 }
4884 PrevVal = Val;
4885 }
4886 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4887 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4888 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4889 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4890 ++NumLinearMaps;
4891 return;
4892 }
4893 }
4894
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004895 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004896 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004897 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004898 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4899 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4900 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004901 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4902 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4903 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4904 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4905 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004906 }
4907 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4908 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4909 Kind = BitMapKind;
4910 ++NumBitMaps;
4911 return;
4912 }
4913
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004914 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004915 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004916 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4917
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004918 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4919 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004920 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004921 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004922 Kind = ArrayKind;
4923}
4924
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004925Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004926 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004927 case SingleValueKind:
4928 return SingleValue;
4929 case LinearMapKind: {
4930 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4931 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4932 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4933 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4934 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4935 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4936 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4937 return Result;
4938 }
4939 case BitMapKind: {
4940 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4941 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004942
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004943 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4944 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4945 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4946 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004947
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004948 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4949 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4950 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4951 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004952
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004953 // Shift down.
4954 Value *DownShifted =
4955 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
4956 // Mask off.
4957 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
4958 }
4959 case ArrayKind: {
4960 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
4961 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4962 uint64_t TableSize =
4963 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
4964 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4965 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
4966 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4967 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004968
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004969 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
4970 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4971 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
4972 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4973 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004974 }
4975 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4976}
4977
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004978bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004979 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004980 Type *ElementType) {
4981 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004982 if (!IT)
4983 return false;
4984 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4985 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004986
4987 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004988 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004989 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004990 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004991}
4992
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004993/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4994/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004995static bool
4996ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4997 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4998 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004999 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5000 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005001
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005002 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005003 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005004 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5005 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005006
5007 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005008 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005009
5010 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005011 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5012 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5013 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005014
5015 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5016 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5017 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5018 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005019 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005020 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005021
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005022 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5023 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5024 return true;
5025
5026 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5027 if (HasIllegalType)
5028 return false;
5029
5030 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5031 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5032 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5033 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005034}
5035
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005036/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5037/// \code
5038/// if (idx < tablesize)
5039/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5040/// else
5041/// r = default_value;
5042/// if (r != default_value)
5043/// ...
5044/// \endcode
5045/// Is optimized to:
5046/// \code
5047/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5048/// if (cond)
5049/// r = table[idx];
5050/// else
5051/// r = default_value;
5052/// if (cond)
5053/// ...
5054/// \endcode
5055/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005056static void reuseTableCompare(
5057 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5058 Constant *DefaultValue,
5059 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005060
5061 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5062 if (!CmpInst)
5063 return;
5064
5065 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5066 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5067 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5068 return;
5069
5070 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5071 if (!CmpOp1)
5072 return;
5073
5074 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5075 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5076 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5077
5078 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5079 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5080 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5081 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5082 return;
5083
5084 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5085 // compare result.
5086 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5087 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005088 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005089 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
5090 return;
5091 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5092 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5093 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005094
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005095 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5096 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5097 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5098 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5099 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5100 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5101 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5102 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5103 return;
5104 }
5105
5106 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5107 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5108 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5109 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5110 } else {
5111 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005112 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5113 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5114 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005115 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5116 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5117 }
5118}
5119
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005120/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5121/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5122/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005123static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5124 const DataLayout &DL,
5125 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005126 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005127
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00005128 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005129 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005130 return false;
5131
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005132 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5133 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5134
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005135 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5136 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5137 // string and lookup indices into that.
5138
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005139 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
5140 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005141 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
5142 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005143 return false;
5144
5145 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005146 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005147 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5148 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
5149 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5150 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5151
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005152 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005153 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
5154 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
5155 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5156 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5157 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005158
5159 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
5160 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5161 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5162 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5163 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5164 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5165
5166 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005167 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005168 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00005169 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005170 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005171 return false;
5172
5173 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005174 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5175 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5176 Constant *Value = I.second;
5177 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5178 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5179 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005180 }
5181 }
5182
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005183 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005184 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005185 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5186 }
5187
5188 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5189 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5190 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5191 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5192
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005193 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5194 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005195 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005196 bool HasDefaultResults =
5197 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5198 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005199
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005200 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5201 if (NeedMask) {
5202 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005203 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005204 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005205 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005206 return false;
5207 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005208
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005209 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5210 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5211 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005212 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005213 }
5214
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005215 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005216 return false;
5217
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005218 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005219 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005220 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5221 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005222
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005223 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005224 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005225 Value *TableIndex =
5226 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005227
5228 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5229 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005230 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005231 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005232 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5233 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5234 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5235
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005236 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5237 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5238 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5239 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5240 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5241 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005242 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5243
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005244 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005245 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005246 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5247 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005248 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005249 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5250 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5251 RangeCheckBranch =
5252 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005253 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005254
5255 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5256 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005257
5258 if (NeedMask) {
5259 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
5260 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
5261 // and we create a new LookupBB.
5262 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5263 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005264 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5265 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005266
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005267 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
5268 // unnecessary illegal types.
5269 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5270 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5271 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005272 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005273 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5274 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005275 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5276 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005277 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5278 }
5279 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5280
5281 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5282 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5283 // else continue with table lookup.
5284 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005285 Value *MaskIndex =
5286 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5287 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5288 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5289 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005290 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5291
5292 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5293 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5294 }
5295
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005296 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5297 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
5298 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5299 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5300 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5301 }
5302
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005303 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005304 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5305 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005306 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005307
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005308 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5309 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005310 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005311
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005312 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005313
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005314 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5315 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005316 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5317 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005318 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5319 ReturnedEarly = true;
5320 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005321 }
5322
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005323 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5324 // possible.
5325 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5326 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5327 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5328 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5329 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5330 }
5331 }
5332
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005333 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005334 }
5335
5336 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5337 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5338
5339 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005340 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005341 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005342
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005343 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005344 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005345 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5346 }
5347 SI->eraseFromParent();
5348
5349 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005350 if (NeedMask)
5351 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005352 return true;
5353}
5354
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005355static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5356 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5357 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5358 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5359 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5360 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5361 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005362
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005363 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5364}
5365
5366// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5367// of cases.
5368//
5369// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5370// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5371//
5372// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5373// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5374static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5375 const DataLayout &DL,
5376 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5377 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5378 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5379 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5380 return false;
5381 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5382 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5383 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5384 return false;
5385
5386 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5387 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5388 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5389 // as signed.
5390 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5391 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5392 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5393 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5394
5395 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5396 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5397 return false;
5398
5399 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5400 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5401 for (auto &V : Values)
5402 V -= Base;
5403
5404 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5405 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5406 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5407 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5408 for (auto &V : Values)
5409 GCD = llvm::GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
5410
5411 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5412 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5413 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5414 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5415 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5416 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5417 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5418 // as the key function.
5419 if (GCD <= 1 || !llvm::isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
5420 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5421 return false;
5422
5423 unsigned Shift = llvm::Log2_64(GCD);
5424 for (auto &V : Values)
5425 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5426
5427 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5428 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5429 return false;
5430
5431 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5432 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5433 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5434 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5435 //
5436 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5437 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5438 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5439 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005440
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005441 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5442 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5443 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5444 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005445 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5446 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5447 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005448 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5449
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005450 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt C = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); C != E;
5451 ++C) {
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005452 auto *Orig = C.getCaseValue();
5453 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005454 C.setValue(
5455 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005456 }
5457 return true;
5458}
5459
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005460bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005461 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5462
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005463 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5464 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5465 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5466 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5467 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005468 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005469
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005470 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5471 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5472 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005473 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005474
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005475 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5476 // away into any preds.
5477 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5478 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5479 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5480 ++BBI;
5481 if (SI == &*BBI)
5482 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005483 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005484 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005485
5486 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005487 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005488 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005489
5490 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005491 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5492 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005493
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005494 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL, TTI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005495 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005496
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005497 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005498 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005499
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005500 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5501 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005502
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005503 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5504 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5505
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005506 return false;
5507}
5508
5509bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5510 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5511 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005512
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005513 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5514 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5515 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5516 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005517 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005518 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5519 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005520 --i;
5521 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005522 Changed = true;
5523 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005524 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005525
5526 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5527 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5528 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5529 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5530 return true;
5531 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005532
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005533 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5534 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5535 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5536 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5537 return true;
5538 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005539
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005540 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5541 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005542 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005543 }
5544 return Changed;
5545}
5546
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005547/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5548/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5549/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5550/// a shared handler.
5551///
5552/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5553/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5554/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5555/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5556/// sinking in this file)
5557///
5558/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5559/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5560/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5561/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5562/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5563/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5564///
5565/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5566/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5567/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5568static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5569 BasicBlock *BB) {
5570 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5571 assert(Succ);
5572 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5573 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5574 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5575 return false;
5576
5577 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5578 if (BB == OtherPred)
5579 continue;
5580 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5581 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5582 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5583 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005584 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5585 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005586 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5587 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5588 continue;
5589
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005590 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005591 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5592 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5593 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5594 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5595 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005596 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5597 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005598 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5599 }
5600
5601 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5602 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005603 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5604 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5605 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005606 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5607 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5608 }
5609
5610 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5611 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5612 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5613 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5614 }
5615
5616 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5617 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5618 BI->eraseFromParent();
5619 return true;
5620 }
5621 return false;
5622}
5623
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005624bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5625 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005626 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005627
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005628 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5629 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005630
5631 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5632 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005633 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5634 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5635 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5636 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005637 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005638 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005639 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005640 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5641 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005642
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005643 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5644 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5645 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5646 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5647 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5648 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005649 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005650 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
5651 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005652 return true;
5653 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005654
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005655 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5656 // equivalent.
5657 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005658 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5659 }
5660 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005661 return true;
5662 }
5663
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005664 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5665 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5666 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5667 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005668 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5669 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005670 return false;
5671}
5672
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005673static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5674 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5675 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5676 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5677 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5678 return nullptr;
5679 PredPred = PPred;
5680 }
5681 return PredPred;
5682}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005683
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005684bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005685 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005686
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005687 // Conditional branch
5688 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5689 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5690 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5691 // switch.
5692 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005693 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005694 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005695
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005696 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5697 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5698 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5699 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5700 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5701 ++I;
5702 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005703 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005704 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005705 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005706 ++I;
5707 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5708 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5709 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005710 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005711 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005712 }
5713 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005714
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005715 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005716 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005717 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005718
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005719 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5720 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5721 // of the BI branch.
5722 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5723 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5724 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5725 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5726 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5727 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5728 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5729 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5730 if (Implication) {
5731 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5732 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5733 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5734 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5735 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5736 BI->setCondition(CI);
5737 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
5738 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5739 }
5740 }
5741 }
5742
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005743 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5744 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5745 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005746 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5747 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005748
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005749 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5750 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5751 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5752 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005753 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5754 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005755 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
5756 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005757 } else {
5758 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005759 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005760 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5761 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5762 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005763 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
5764 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005765 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005766 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005767 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005768 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005769 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5770 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5771 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005772 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
5773 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005774 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005775
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005776 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5777 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5778 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5779 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005780 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005781 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005782
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005783 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005784 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5785 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005786 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005787 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005788 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005789
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005790 // Look for diamond patterns.
5791 if (MergeCondStores)
5792 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5793 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5794 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5795 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
5796 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005797
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005798 return false;
5799}
5800
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005801/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5802static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5803 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5804 if (!C)
5805 return false;
5806
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005807 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005808 return false;
5809
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005810 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005811 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005812 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005813
5814 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5815 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005816 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5817 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5818 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5819 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005820 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005821 return false;
5822
5823 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5824 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5825 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5826 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5827
5828 // Look through bitcasts.
5829 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5830 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5831
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005832 // Load from null is undefined.
5833 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005834 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5835 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005836
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005837 // Store to null is undefined.
5838 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005839 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005840 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5841 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005842
5843 // A call to null is undefined.
5844 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5845 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005846 }
5847 return false;
5848}
5849
5850/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005851/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005852static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5853 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5854 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5855 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5856 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5857 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5858 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5859 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5860 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5861 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5862 // destination from conditional branches.
5863 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5864 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5865 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005866 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5867 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005868 BI->eraseFromParent();
5869 return true;
5870 }
5871 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5872 }
5873
5874 return false;
5875}
5876
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005877bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005878 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005879
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005880 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005881 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005882
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005883 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5884 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005885 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005886 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005887 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5888 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5889 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005890 }
5891
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005892 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5893 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005894 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005895
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005896 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5897 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5898
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005899 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5900 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5901
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005902 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5903 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5904 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5905 //
5906 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5907 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005908
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005909 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5910
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005911 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5912 // eliminate it, do so now.
5913 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5914 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005915 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005916
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005917 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005918 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005919 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005920 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5921 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005922 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005923 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5924 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005925 }
5926 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005927 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5928 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005929 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005930 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5931 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005932 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005933 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5934 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5935 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005936 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005937 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5938 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005939 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005940 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5941 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5942 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005943 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005944 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5945 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
5946 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005947 }
5948
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005949 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005950}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005951
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005952/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5953/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005954/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5955/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5956///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005957bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005958 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
5959 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005960 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005961 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders)
5962 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005963}